Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 .

2 .

including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. electrical panels. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add basic MEP elements. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. such as duct. electrical. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and piping.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.

but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Metric file names have an _m suffix. such as templates and families. Create schedules. templates. In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. however. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. annotations. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Contact your CAD manager for more information. as well as how to open and save them. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. when you add ductwork. and tags. However. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. to provide a richer and more finished design. Create detail views. On the Contents tab.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. is located and accessed in the training files location. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. you learn where the training files are located. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . After completing each exercise. views. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. When you install the training files as instructed. For example. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. When you open a training file. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. NOTE Depending on your installation. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. your Training folder may be in a different location. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. For example. You do not design entire systems. and sheets to document the project. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. So. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects.

and click the Training Files icon. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt) is selected. and you can open any supported file type. For File name. double-click Imperial or Metric. Accessing Training Files | 5 . 3 In the right pane.rvt. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. a list of file types displays. enter the new file name. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. you are prompted to save the changes. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. scroll down. verify that Project Files (*. click ➤ Save As. 4 Click the training file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For Files of type. if you open settings. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. the Open dialog displays. For example. 8 If you have made changes. You may close the file with or without saving changes. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Save. and click Open.rvt and make changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.

6 .

If the length of the elevation is changed. drawings. As you work in drawing and schedule views. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the hierarchy of elements. the floor or roof remains connected. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. and phases when you need it.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawing sheets. the operation of the software is parametric. and plans. quantities. the parameter is one of association or connection. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. every drawing sheet. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. You learn the terminology. In the Revit MEP model. In this case. ■ ■ 7 . If you move the partition. sections. and schedules required for a building project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. hence. 2D and 3D view. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. schedules. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. scope. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition.

ducts. For example. They help to describe or document the design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. levels. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. sprinklers. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. dimensions. sprinklers. sinks. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. tags. dimensions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. They display in relevant views of the design. and reference planes are datum elements. and 2D detail components. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels. and electrical panels. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. filled regions. Examples include detail lines. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. boilers. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sinks. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . boilers. For example. grids. tags. When you change something. ducts.

you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and so forth). schedules. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. section views. top of wall. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. This information includes components used to design the model. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. elevation views. or bottom of foundation. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. floors. If you can draw. from geometry to construction data. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. In other cases. The project file contains all information for the building design. Project: In Revit MEP. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and ceilings. and drawings of the design. In Revit MEP. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you can explicitly control them.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. for example. Often. By using a single project file. programming is not required. and types. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. views of the project. first floor. such as roofs. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. North . For example. Most often. families. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. To place levels.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you must be in a section or elevation view. they are implied by what you do and how you draw.

such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. identical use. Unlike system and standard component families. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as a A0 title block. hiding. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. System families include ducts. System families can be transferred between projects. or layer the views to see only the one on top. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. and wires. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . With a few clicks. For example. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. each in-place family contains only a single type. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. For example. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). pipes. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. However. A type can also be a style. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. showing. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Then experiment with them. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Type: Each family can have several types. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and similar graphical representation. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.

click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To return the panel to the ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels.

When working on the Modify tab. architect-specific tools. and settings. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members.. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. and CAD files. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for running analysis on the current design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements. project and system parameters. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. data and systems. select the tool first. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.

click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides access to common tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays frequently used tools. To keep a panel expanded. By default. For example. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. when adding duct. closes the application menu (double-click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls.

The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing. select a file to open. such as Export and Publish. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. click. select a template and create a new drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Export) On the application menu.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics ..

or template file.. Camera. click.On the application menu. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. or template file.. annotation. provides views including Default 3D.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. annotation.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Publish) print the current drawing. but is not enabled by default. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. To enable or disable a tool item. family. saves a current project. and Walkthrough. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . publish the current project. (Print) access product and license information. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Licensing) close the file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. to.

When you are highlighting an element or component. or the Family Editor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Group. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.To undo or redo a series of operations. workshared components. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clipboard. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Starting with the most recent command. Modify. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. repeat the command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. To hide the Status Bar. In addition. when you switch to another editing mode. displaying the same information. To show the Status Bar again. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. However. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . This displays the command history in a list. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. check the Status Bar. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. When you are using a command.

To cancel or exit the current command. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Place a Wall. select one or more elements of the same category. On the Quick Access toolbar.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. In the following steps. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.rvt. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. There are several ways to access zoom options.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . 5 Click Zoom To Fit. on the Navigation bar. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. NOTE As you zoom in and out. To modify or add snap increments. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Modifying the View | 19 . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. In the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 6 Click in the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 9 To display SteeringWheels. When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window.

the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Click and drag to orbit the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 14 To exit the wheel. ➤ Options. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. moving the wheel to the desired location. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. For more information about SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the SteeringWheels tab. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. As you move the mouse. To define settings for SteeringWheels.

zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls. 3 Click and drag the bottom control.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Small blue dots. 2 Enter ZR. display along the ends.Design. referred to as shape handles.Design ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and open Level 2 . and select the duct. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. bottoms. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. These are the drag controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Performing Common Tasks | 21 .HVAC Plan . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.

select the first item in the list. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 6 On the Undo menu. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move. such as Move and Copy. for example.Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In this case. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 11 With the duct already selected. you want to move the duct. as shown.

Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Press ESC twice. 14 Enter VG. Click OK. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. For example. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Select Mechanical .Supply. such as the Modify Ducts command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Return. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. system families. click Browse.rte template. click Training files. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as coordination review and interference checking. You can either select a template from the template library. such as ducts and pipes. 6 Click OK. you learn how to start a project from a template. and open North. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Finally. and modify system settings.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. In that case. create and manage views. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as the default project units and settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. settings. and geometry from the starting template. 2 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 7 In the Project Browser. and open Metric ➤ Templates. use copy/monitor. under Create new. and click Open. 27 . and loadable families. 5 In the New Project dialog. link files. the default building levels and standard views. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Template file. select Project. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. New projects inherit all the families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).

Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Manchester.8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Click OK twice. select Project template. NH. 10 Using the same method. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for Energy Data. (Browse). click (Browse). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. When you select the material. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. ■ ■ Under Create new. Click Cancel. review the construction materials listed. for City. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. If you want to use a template other than the default. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. navigate to Metric Templates. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select School or University. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. ■ For Building Construction. you can select it now. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. create another new project using the Construction template. For example. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Location. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Edit. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Level 1.rte template and click Open. click Browse. In the Choose Template dialog.

00 mm. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and 140. 110.00 mm. click Sizes. 260. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. piping. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 310. 140. 27 Click OK.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. for 90. for 20. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 33 Click OK. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 290. click Round.00 mm. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. under Duct Settings. select Views. select Identity Data.00 mm.00 mm. and demand factors for electrical systems. under Pipe Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. click Rectangular. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 26 In the right pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. power distribution systems. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and fire protection systems. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder.00 mm. plumbing. For Categories. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.000 mm. 22 In the right pane.rfa and click Open.00 mm. for 90. 24 In the right pane. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.00 mm. click Wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Click OK twice.00 mm. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 23 In the left pane. 110. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark.

38 Close the file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Project. For Sort by. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. select Associated Level. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Then by. For Then by. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. In addition.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. families. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. Click Open. select Auto . Notice that the file is saved as a template. select View Name. select Family and Type. click Browse. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. click Training.rvt. and groups that are contained in a project. 5 Click OK. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. under Create new. 2 In the New Project dialog. From the Positioning list. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Linking Projects In this exercise.Origin to Origin. You need to create the MEP model for the project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. sheets. To enable this coordination. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Sub-Discipline. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog.

reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . under Constraints. Linking Projects | 31 . Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. select the linked architectural model. 8 If necessary. select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK.Mech.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. click the level line for 03.Floor. 19 On the left side of the view. 17 On the Options Bar. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. click Plan View types. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.

appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. If you modify a monitored element. 29 In the drawing area. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. level 3. a warning message displays. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and that the copied elements are monitored. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click By Host View. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. click Custom. 27 In the drawing area. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. indicating that an element has changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. highlight the linked model. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. After copying. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. for the link file. select Custom. warnings notify you of any violations. indicating that a relationship is established. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. appears above the copied elements. and click to select the linked model. and the level 4. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. Linking Projects | 33 . 34 On the Basics tab. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed.

right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 5 On the Basics tab. for the link file. select Custom. for Name. deselect Parking. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Site. under View Properties. click Custom. Roads. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. enter Mechanical View and click OK. Planting. deselect Levels. click Edit. and Topography.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Click OK. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 2 In the New View Template dialog. Under Visibility. 7 Click OK twice. click Custom. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility. 36 Click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog. you create a view template and apply it to your project template.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Click OK. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise.

Modifying General System Options In this exercise. notification preferences. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. under Template file. click Browse. 7 Click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying System Settings In this exercise.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. and your username when using worksharing. selection default options. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. click the Graphics tab. and click OK. These settings control the graphics. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Notice that the drawing area is black. 9 In the Options dialog. they are not saved to project files or template files. 3 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Mechanical and click OK. select Invert background color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 5 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. under View Templates. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP.rte.

For Tooltip assistance.10 Under Colors. select One hour. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 19 Press ESC to end the command. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 21 Close the file without saving it. 17 Press ESC to end the command. select yellow. click the File Locations tab. 18 Select the wall. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 2 In the Options dialog. 13 Under Notifications. and click OK. However. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 11 In the Color dialog. click the value for Selection color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 14 Click OK. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. you specify default file locations. select None. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. and family libraries. family template files. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. the elements causing the error display using this color. including your default project template. When an error occurs. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 12 Click the General tab. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files.

under Default path for family template files. note the list of library names. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. centralized. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Specifying File Locations | 37 . In the following illustration. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 Under Default path for user files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. such as in a large. Save. you can start a new project with that template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 7 In the Options dialog. However. and click Open. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. click Browse. 4 Click Cancel. You can modify the existing library names and path. TIP To view a template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. click Places. click Browse. or loading a Revit MEP file. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.3 Under Default template file. When you are opening. saving. and Import dialogs. Load. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. 8 Click Cancel. Click and click Browse to select a template. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and you can create new libraries.

click My Library. and click (Browse). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. ➤ Open. or families. and click OK twice. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog. Load. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and change the name to My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. click (Add Value). and select it as the library path. and Import dialogs. Save.

12 Create a new project using the default template. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. custom color files. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. select Ignore words in uppercase. If you work in a large office. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 11 In the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. 9 In the text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you want to relocate this path. such as bump maps. (Remove Value) to delete the library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 20 Click ➤ Options. click OK. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. enter sheetmtl-Cu. view the current path. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Click in the drawing area. 27 Click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. click Edit. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab. 5 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. click Places. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 3 Under Settings. specify the new location here. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 19 Click Cancel. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and decal image files.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path.

19 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. click Close.. click Training Files. 25 Close the file without saving it. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 23 In the text editor. click OK. you modify snap settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and enter 500 . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. As you zoom in and out within a view. click the Spelling tab. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 24 In the Options dialog. 18 Click ➤ Options.rte. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 20 Under Settings. 4 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK. under Dimension Snaps. click Restore Defaults. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Edit. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it.17 In the Spelling dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Template file. click Browse. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 22 In the text editor. you modify snap increments.

While sketching. click OK. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching. If it does not. zoom out until it does so. enter SM.7 Under Object Snaps. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . use the wheel button on your mouse. If you do not have a wheel button. 8 In the Snaps dialog. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. For example. snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and move the cursor to the right. deselect Chain. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.

19 Enter SM. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and the wall edges. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. with or without saving it. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the midpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and move the cursor to the right. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. it will snap to the endpoints. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Close the file. and specify the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 25 Click OK. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and delete the value 500 . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping..

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .

44 .

Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. As you create the mechanical system. If the tutorial training files are not present. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you will understand the process. methodology. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP). you can choose to save your work. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first configure the linked architectural model. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This system consists of a cooling tower. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. In this exercise. you first plan the system. After applying a color scheme to the zones. go to http://www. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory.autodesk. and then you create a plenum level. At the end of the tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. By following the recommended workflow. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. 45 . and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial.

5 Press Esc to clear the selection. not in the MEP training file. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. under Constraints.Space Plan is highlighted. select Room Bounding. NOTE When working with a linked file. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and double-click West .Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). roof. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. you add a level for plenums. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and click OK. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. Next. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click to select it. click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. These components are defined in the architectural training file. ceilings. In this section. In the left pane of the Open dialog.MEP.rvt. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 6 In the Project Browser.

click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. enter 2600mm. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 16 Press Esc. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. right-click Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and click OK. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and click Properties. The new level is placed. For Offset. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 9 On the Draw panel. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4).

48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For View Classification. However. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. In this exercise. for View Range. for Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. and then place spaces in various types of areas.Plenum. NOTE After finishing each exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In this exercise. for Top. ■ Click OK twice. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. you place spaces in areas of the building model. you can choose to save your work. for Level. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. Under Identity Data.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. enter an Offset of 300mm. for View Scale. For Cut plane.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For Sub-Discipline. select Plenum Plan. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Under Extents. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. and for Offset. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and click Apply Default View Template. select Design. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In the next exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Above (Level 3). it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. click Edit. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 0. select MEP .

For (Tag Location). 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select New. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. For Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. walls. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Horizontal. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. indicating that it’s the active view. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Space. and ceilings).rvt.

Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Library. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. enter 219. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.7 Click to place the space. For Name. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ensuring coordination between the files. Click OK. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). for Number.

Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Upper Limit. For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. and then click Modify. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3.

under Energy Analysis. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click OK. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. for Upper Limit. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . click Training Files. select Level 3. and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0. and then press Esc. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.

9 In the schedule. and select Corridor. click in the name column.7 In the Project Browser. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 Click in the number column. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and change the space number to 216A. which was numbered 219Q. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. In the schedule.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 15 Press Esc twice.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 11 Close the schedule view.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise.16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. If necessary. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).rvt. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint.

58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Interior and Reference. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. click in the chase area to place the space. and click Element Properties. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Enter VG. enter 0. for Upper Limit. On the Options Bar. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Upper Limit. right-click. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. In the plan view. expand Spaces. 10 In the plan view. select the space. select Roof Level. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. For Offset. and then click OK. select Level 3.

All spaces in the view are tagged. and maximize the view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 17 Type ZF. ceilings. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. and click OK. enter 225PC. floors.Space Plan. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Loaded Tags. Under Identity Data. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.■ For Limit Offset. for Name. Bounding elements (such as walls. For Number. enter 1200. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. enter Chase. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . 15 Press Esc.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. To display space reference lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. click View ➤ Zones. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. In this exercise. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. After a space is placed in an area. click Training Files. which removes the space from the Default zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. click Reference.rvt. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. In the next exercises. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Spaces.Zoning is highlighted.20 Close the file with or without saving it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. it is automatically added to the Default zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. indicating that it’s the active view.

click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates. and verify the zones in the System Browser. you assign spaces to zones in the building. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. indicating that the space is occupiable. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines. under Energy Analysis. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Next. click Reference. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. The new zone is listed in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The Zone tool is active. select Occupiable. As you do this. and click OK. ) or 5 In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. and a new zone is created. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). you assign spaces to a zone. under Spaces.

select HVAC Zones. In the System Browser. Instruction 221. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. you need to activate the zone visibility.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. Click OK. and click Finish Editing Zone. 5 With the drawing area active. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you can add or remove a space from the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. 4 In the drawing area. To view the zone in the drawing area. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). type VG. and modify the zone properties. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.

Area B. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. enter 2 . expand 2 . You activated zone visibility in the views. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Click in the Level 1 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the System Browser.West . under Spaces. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.Zoning view to activate it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Identity Data. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 11 Close the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). for Name.Zoning. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.West . and verify the zone in the System Browser.rvt. click Finish Editing Zone.

9 With the Add Space tool active. click in the Level 2 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 15 Press Esc.Zoning view.Zoning floor plan.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. zoom out. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Select Attached End. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 12mm. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 In the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.

space. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and click OK. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries.Zoning to make it the active view. Front. double-click the zone tag. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify the building. on the ViewCube. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans.East. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and select 109 Lounge. enter Lounge . for Name Value. verify that Wireframe is selected. click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click the corner where the Top. and zone information. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. In this exercise.Zoning view. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it.rvt. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. With 109 Lounge selected. click (Isolate). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ ■ On the Details tab. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Click (Highlight). select 1_South_Area C. Using the Highlight tool. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you isolate the space. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. For Electrical Loads. Below the list of spaces and zones. select Lounge/Recreation. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area.11 °C : 32. Next. click .22 °C : N/A is specified.22 °C : N/A is specified. For Construction Type. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. verify that 21. scroll down in the left pane. For Heating Information.33 °C : 12. verify that 23.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. click (Shading). Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For People. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. heating air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. and air changes per hour. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. For Cooling Information. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and humidification set point. the space information displays for the selected space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. select 109 Lounge. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. click . you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the outdoor air per person. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Building> is selected. and click OK. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. cooling air temperature. and dehumidification set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. and then click OK. and then click OK. and in the People dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone.

and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. floors. select Level 3. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. click Cancel. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP .NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. roofs. and other room-bounding components. 12 Using the methods learned previously. enter 0. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Offset. 15 In the Project Browser.

■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and zone information. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Click OK. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. For Name. space. select Plenum. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Under Energy Analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. you verified building. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Because this is an unoccupied space. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. for Number. enter 212P.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and verify that the space has replaced the void. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. and select space Plenum 212P. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .

verify that Level 1 is selected. If. NH. under Energy Analysis. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. For Sliver Space Tolerance. On the Weather tab. this option adjusts the times automatically. Click OK twice. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. verify that New Construction is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Location. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click.rvt. On the Place tab. is selected. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. click Edit. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Manchester. For Ground Plane. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that <Building> is specified. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for City. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. select School or University. click in the Value field. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 . For Building Construction. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and click Element Properties. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. enter 03101. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . for Building Service. For Postal Code. for Energy Data. For Export Complexity. In order to select a space. For Project Phase. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Volume Computations. verify that 300 is specified. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the drawing area. you need to select this option.Space Plan. select space Library 219.

and enter 15 sq. select Actual. Under Power. click Edit. For Building Service. a cooling load. both. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select Library . 12 Click the Details tab. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. For Sensible. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. For Condition Type. enter 60 W. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog).9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Space Type. NH. For Building Construction. For Location. click in the Value column. or neither. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Heated and cooled. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. select Specified. and then click . you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and click OK. Select Area per person.Audio Visual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . You have verified the building information. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Select the space associated with the warning. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. select Actual. Click OK twice. verify that School or University is selected. for Values. for Values. click Edit. verify that <Building> is specified. select Specified. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK. For People. verify that Occupiable is selected. m. is specified. verify that Manchester. for Values. and click to learn the cause for the warning. enter 45 W. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. Next. for Values. For Latent.

Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. and zone information for the building model. 19 In the drawing area. In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. space. 17 In the loads report. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. You should correct the space error in the building model. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. weather. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 Review the loads report for project. and a loads report displays. verify that Heating Set Point is 21.11°C. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. or zone information. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and click OK. space. or make any changes to the model.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library.Space Plan. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. and under Heating Information. click Calculate. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. under Energy Analysis. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. click Information). select 219 Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 21 Click OK. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. There should be no warnings displayed.

in relatively small increments.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Color Scheme. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. Click OK. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. click to the right of the building to place the legend. select HVAC Zones. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click Training Files. 3 In the drawing area.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. The new scheme displays in the view.Expanded Ranges. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select the color scheme legend. under Schemes.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select Cooling Load .

12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Using the method learned previously. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.

Click OK. For Name. In the Fields dialog. enter Space Airflow Schedule. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter .Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. click (Browse). In the Calculated Value dialog. enter Airflow Delta. Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Select available fields from. select HVAC. For Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Select Schedule building components. select New Construction. select Air Flow. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Discipline. For Type. select Spaces. Under Available fields. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. For Phase. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Select Formula. for Formula. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. more category options are available. and click OK.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and then click . ■ Click Calculated Value.

Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. select Not Between. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. verify that Show is highlighted. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. select Airflow Delta.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. a view opens that contains the selected space. ■ The schedule displays. For Background Color. right-click to access schedule properties. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . select red. Under Conditions to Use. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. and then click Conditional Format. In the Color dialog. select Number. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. select Level. For Then by. click the color swatch. For Fields. and Blank line. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Header. For Value. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. select Level. Click OK twice. and then select Hidden field.

In later exercises. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In the next lesson.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 . As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). After system creation. In this lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. After completing the air systems lesson. and work with the airflow schedule. you will create supply air systems. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you modify air terminal parameters.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems.

HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and scroll to space 223. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files.

and press Enter. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command. 15 On the Options Bar. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. and then select both Copy and Multiple. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 9 On the Placement panel. If the host element is modified or moved. the hosted elements are updated as well. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. type 3600. 13 On the Options Bar. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 17 Move the cursor down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. verify that Constrain is cleared. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Also. The schedule updates with the new flow data. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. select the diffuser. enter 215 L/s. and press Enter. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. click Place on Face.

rfa. 22 In the drawing area. as shown. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. As you place the return diffusers. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select one of the diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes. and click Open. Next. clear Leader. click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 25 In the drawing area.

under Other. click Yes. Level. select one of the return diffusers. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. and click to select the lines. for Reference. 32 In the Project Browser. and click OK. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

select the vertical grid line as shown. and then press Esc twice. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. align the other return diffuser. 43 Using the same method. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. as shown.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 40 In the drawing area. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

and click Element Properties. right-click. 47 Using the same method. enter 310 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . clear LeftArrow. and press Enter. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. under Mechanical. for Flow.44 While pressing Ctrl. and click OK. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. select both return diffusers. and on the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Design to make it the active view.HVAC Plan . 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. and double-click Level 1 . select M_Supply Diffuser . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. at the lower left corner of the building. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. the space crossing lines display. for Scale. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.200 Neck. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. click 1 : 100. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 9 On the Options Bar. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 10 In the drawing area. 8 In the Type Selector.

the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. type 6000. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Click OK. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. By copying the diffuser. for Offset. Under Mechanical .Airflow. and then press Enter. enter 170 L/s. As a result.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. enter 2400. Also. 15 Press Esc. for Flow. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. move the cursor down. under Constraints. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 11 Select the diffuser.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . clear Leader. and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.16 Using the same method.

27 In the schedule. Mark. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. enter 210 L/s. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. under Available Fields. it is a negative value. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. mark. for Sort by. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). and press Enter. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 29 Using the same method. select Air Terminals. select Mark. click Edit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. and Flow. tile the windows. For Category. 26 Using the method learned previously. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. Type. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . under space 115. double-click System Type. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. type. for Embedded Schedule. for Flow. select 21. 25 Click OK 3 times.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. under Other. and then right-click in the schedule. and click View Properties. Next.

and maximize Level 1 . 31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.HVAC Plan . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. As you highlight the zone.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. as shown. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.Design. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.

37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space.Horizontal . verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.3 times the heating load).32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. and under Energy Analysis. 35 In the Type Selector.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.43 W (approximately 1. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . 33 Click OK. select M_WSHP . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.High Efficiency .7-18 kW . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. 36 In the drawing area.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT In the System Browser. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. for Constraints ➤ Offset. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. including energy analysis. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. right-click the title. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. In this exercise.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. However. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 6 Keep the System Browser open. After creating the logical connection. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems.rvt. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. click Training Files. enter . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 44 Zoom in to space 115. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. As you add diffusers to systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. and click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building.

the air terminals are the children. 12 In the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 15 Click Cancel. and the system connects them. the number of elements is updated. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and Flow value. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. On the Options Bar. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. review the Number of Elements. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 18 Click OK. 17 Using the method learned previously. Connect Into. System Name. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 11 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for System Name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 22 Click OK. In this exercise. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. which updates the name in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 25 Click OK. for Mark. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.rvt. click Training Files. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m.Rename the system Next. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. under Mechanical.

A Generate Layout tab displays. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.HVAC Plan. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Network. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Network type provides several solutions. enter 3000. which provides various layout tools. For Flex Duct Type. For Offset. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). Select Branch. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select the upper left diffuser. 4 In the drawing area.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . In this case. For Duct Type. the space crossing lines display. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . for Solution Type. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. Also.Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 3000.Round. 7 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Duct Type. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and display solution 1. click Settings. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.

as shown. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. or manually modify the duct. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. as is the elbow itself. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. you’ll get an error in a later step. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. enter 900. or offset elevations are incorrect.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For example. 11 Click Finish Layout. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. Either relocate the system components. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Click OK.

You can delete ductwork and the system remains. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. highlight a segment of the main duct. The first time you press Tab. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. thus it is not part of the system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. If the entire network does not highlight. for Color Scheme. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. select Duct Color Fill . Usually. a disconnection exists. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click OK.Flow. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. fittings. and equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme.

and click OK. under Mechanical . select the WSHP.Airflow. for Flow. for Values Displayed. select one of the diffusers in the system. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Graphics. select By View. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. but not all values are used in this view. 20 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and press Enter. and then click OK. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

click Cancel. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Friction. Under Constraints. select Calculated Size Only.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Click OK. Select Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct.Velocity. and drag it to the right. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Select the upper segment of main duct. select the color scheme legend. and select 400. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.65 Pa/m. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. for Branch Sizing. for Schemes. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and then click to select it. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 .

32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Using this tool. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss. static pressure. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. pressure.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.

also known as the critical path. click Training Files. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. 35 Click Finish. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

Design is highlighted.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. indicating that it’s the active view. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP. and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

NOTE When drawing duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Front. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click MEP . select the top right diffuser. 11 On the Options Bar. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 15 On the ViewCube. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.3D MEP. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. enter 3000.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and click Draw Duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. click the corner where the Top. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector grip. for Offset.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. it is considered a closed loop. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D.

Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser.22 Using the same method. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

30 Press Esc twice. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations.

The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .Airflow. and click to select it. under Constraints. 40 Using the same method. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. for Flow. under Mechanical . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). such as a plenum. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click OK. clear Restrict Height. select a segment of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.

108 .

Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Then. In this lesson. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. on level 3 of the building model. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Automatically and manually lay out piping. 109 . or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. click Training Files. in corridor 328. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .7-18kW .HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select M_WSHP . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted.Horizontal High Efficiency .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and enter 600. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 8 Click the corridor wall face. verify that Wall faces is selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and click to place the dimension. as shown.

and in the Type Selector. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 14 Click Modify. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select the 2 WSHPs.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

as shown. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Modify. enter 2750. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 0.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. for Water Flow. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.75 L/s.

Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create the logical connection between the system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. including flow and pressure. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. but without a corresponding system. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. Unlike logical connections (systems). The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.22 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . It does not indicate a pipe layout path. In the System Browser. while pressing Ctrl. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system.rvt. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. select the 2 WSHPs. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Creating a Piping System | 115 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. As you assign equipment to systems. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 5 In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. where it is easier to review the information.HVAC Plan . Therefore. indicating that it’s the active view. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. This display indicates that the system is selected. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. Assigning a system component to an existing system. and click View ➤ Piping.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. 12 In the drawing area. Notice that on the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. You have created the hydronic return system. for System Name. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 13 Click Finish Editing System. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. under Design ➤ HVAC . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. In cooling mode. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and bypasses the cooling tower. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. and select the cooling tower. double-click Roof . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.HVAC Plan . and click OK. In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 26 Click Finish Editing System. 23 Close the roof plan view. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

under Mechanical. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the System Browser.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter 0. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click Expand All.8. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 28 Using the same method. and click Select. indicating the logical connection. 32 In the System Browser. expand Piping. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Column Settings. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 29 Right-click CHWS. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Properties.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.rvt. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. When you draw a box to select components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. select Mechanical Equipment. you can place the cursor over a system component. then the Select a System dialog displays. the boiler. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Mech 330). 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . click Check None. and click to select it. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. 5 In the Filter dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. A system preview displays in red. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and click OK.

IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. or architectural components. 13 Click Cancel. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that Solutions is selected. select CHWR. 10 Click OK. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. duct. For Inset. click Settings. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.9 In the Select a System dialog. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 On the Generate Layout tab. It does not reference the architecture. select Perimeter. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. enter 450.

and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . the flow for each WSHP is 0. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. With each Tab. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.75 L/s.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. 23 Under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.50 L/s. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and access its instance properties. and click OK.75 L/s). 22 Select the boiler. 24 Press Esc. and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 1. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs.

double-click Level 1 . 32 Click Finish Editing System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. click Edit System. 28 In the Project Browser. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Number of Elements is now 8. On the Options Bar. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 27 On the System Tools panel. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.HVAC Plan .

and then close the Instance Properties dialog. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.50 L/s. under Mechanical. as shown. 35 Using the drag control. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .94 L/s.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. which propagates flow throughout the system. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties.44 L/s. note that the value for Flow is 4.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. and click Cancel. you physically close the CHWR loop. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Next. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6.94 L/s. 38 Using the same method. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. so the total flow of 6. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.

Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 0. select CHWS. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . For Inset. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select a WSHP. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 41 Click OK. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. For Slope. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter 450.00%.

select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. In a later exercise. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.

Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. as shown. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 50 Using the same method. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select a different layout solution. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 .

indicating that it’s the active view. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. as shown. As you work in the training file. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D Building. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design is highlighted. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.rvt. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and the return pipes are magenta. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.HVAC Plan .

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown. 7 In the plan view.

130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and press Esc to clear the selection. 9 In the 3D view. select the boiler. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. Click to specify the reference point.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

The connections are automatically created. and click OK. and the lower one is secondary. and click Draw Pipe. select the boiler. 12 In the 3D view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary.

and press Enter. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. enter 381. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. enter 600. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and you select 1 connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor down. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector.

select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together. and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 18 Press Esc twice. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK.

and click Draw Pipe. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and select it. as shown. and click to draw the pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom connector. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump.

and click to create the pipe. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .28 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. enter 1200. right-click the discharge connector. 29 If necessary. select the primary base mounted pump. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.

Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.33 Press Esc. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.

as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

and click to create the pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .■ Move the cursor down. enter 2850. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. type 300. for Offset.

Next.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system. you validate the flow through the system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties. right-click. 42 Click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow.44 L/s. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. notice that Flow is 6. under Mechanical.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 48 In the plan view. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow is being propagated through the piping. the value is 0 L/s. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 40 Click Cancel. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. right-click. Connect the cooling tower Next. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. and click Element Properties. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . When you create the pumps in parallel. as shown. 41 Using the same method. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. for Cooling Water Flow.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. view the properties for the secondary pump.44 L/s). 46 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. notice that under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 3. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 50 In the 3D View.44 L/s. select the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . the water bypasses the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. click Training Files. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).52 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. When the valve is open.HVAC Plan . as shown. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

and select M_Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.4 On the Options Bar.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 . 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve.10 Press Esc. place another M_Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method.

For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s. under Mechanical. Adding Valves | 147 . right-click. 19 Using the same method. and click OK.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 6. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties.

In heating mode. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.44 L/s.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Using the method you just learned. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.44 L/s. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. 20 Select the bypass valve. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. Initially. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 6. and select M_Ball Valve . (This valve allows the water to flow through it.rvt.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.

and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. for Schemes. as shown. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. and click OK. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Size.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Pipe Color Fill .HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Pipe Color Fill .Flow. indicating that it’s the active view.

for Branch Sizing. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select a different layout solution. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 1. and enter 220 Pa/m. or manually modify the pipe. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. 13 Press Esc.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. or offset elevations are incorrect. Under Constraints. and click to select the branch. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Click OK. Either relocate the system components. Select And. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and for Velocity.5 m/s. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

Inspecting the System In this exercise. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. and double-click 3D Building. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System | 151 . you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.rvt.Design ➤ 3D Views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. pressure. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. click Training Files. Using the System Inspector. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

flow. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An inspection flag reports the section number.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as required. as shown. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. select 32° C. for Fluid Temperature. Warnings display. the Static Pressure is 41916.4 Pa. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Using the same method.HVAC Plan .7. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. targeting those systems that need attention.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . and double-click Level 3 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and to size pipe. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Note that the Flow is 1.0 L/s. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.1 Pa. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. In this exercise. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. click Training Files. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and click OK. inspect Section 6 again. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.

Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. otherwise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.HVAC Plan . 7 In the System Browser. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. As you learned when placing components. 10 Using the same methods. and click Show to view all of the system components. In the System Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. the pipe is associated with that system. thus assigning the components to a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. 12 In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. click Close. right-click the Systems titlebar. and click Expand All. If you place components without assigning them to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. double-click Level 1 . TIP If you have multiple views open. For example. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you have assigned all components to systems. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. and for pipe sizing. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down.Design floor plan. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Hydronic Return. 6 In the Project Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 9 Right-click CHWS. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 4 In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. and select Level 3 . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. and click View. and confirm unassigned system components. After you assign components to a system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

158 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

select Copper. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring Types. speeding up the design phase. and demand factors that are applied in the design. ■ Click New Correction Factor.04. For Material. Select Correction Factor. In this exercise you review electrical settings. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. click Training Files. As you place components and create circuits. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also add a wiring type. For Factor. wiring. click (Open).Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. expand Wiring . 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Copper. distribution systems. select 90.rvt. ■ ■ For Material. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter 70. enter THHN. Click OK. enter 1.Wire Sizes. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. For Temperature.

For Value. select Power. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 240. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 2000. select 10000 VA. select Demand Factors. select 3.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For L-L Voltage. enter 120/240. For Phase. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For L-G Voltage. select 75. enter 1. enter 250. Select Neutral Required. select Steel. select Distribution Systems. select 240. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 240. By specifying a range. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Max Size. For Neutral Size. select Hot Conductor Size. For Neutral Multiplier. enter 50. Click Split. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Conduit Type. Under More Than. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Voltage Definitions. select Single. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. For Maximum. select THHN.0. For Wires. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 220. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For Minimum. Click OK. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. For Insulation. select 120.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Click OK twice. Under Categories. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. select Electrical . and conference rooms.rvt. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under the Electrical .Design ➤ Floor Plans. For Group Parameter Under. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Lighting.Lighting group in the space element properties. select Electrical. and double-click Level 2 . In this case the key style is the type of space and. click Add. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. Verify that Instance is selected. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Spaces. Later in the tutorial. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. click (Open). For Discipline. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). 5 In the drawing area. For Type of Parameter. click Training Files. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan.Lighting Plan. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. such as offices.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. restrooms. enter Required Lighting Level. select Illuminance. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. Click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. enter Lighting Levels. select Spaces. under Available Fields. Select Schedule Keys. under Electrical . and click OK.Lighting. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. enter Open Office. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. Click OK. double-click Required Lighting Level. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . and for Key Name. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter 485. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name.

Lighting Plan. change the sort order back to the default setting.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . which is mapped to project units. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Edit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. for Sorting/Grouping. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. Select Blank Line. select Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 22 Using the same method. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 21 Click OK twice. Notice that as you enter the data.

The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. In this exercise. for Lighting Levels. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. click (Open). you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Later in this exercise. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Instruction-Standard. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. the value input applies only to the selected space. that Required Lighting Level is blank. under Identity Data. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. 27 Click OK. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

enter 200. and press ENTER. enter Required Lighting Levels. click (Duplicate). for Category. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. for Title. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. For Color. and press Enter. select Spaces. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and in the At Least column. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Select the scheme for 500 lx. enter 800. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. enter Required Lighting and click OK. and click (Add Value) five times. Under Schemes. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. click (Add Value) again. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.00. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. verify the By Range is selected. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.00. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. ■ Click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter 900. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. and click (Add Value). 00 lx still selected.00 lx. for Name. For example. then the new value will be 400 lx. Select the scheme for 450.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Required Lighting Level.00 lx. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and press ENTER. click Training Files.00 lx.

11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Type. select Electrical. select Illuminance. double-click Number.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. For Name. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select Spaces. select Spaces. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. Name. Click OK. For Color Scheme. 13 Click Calculated Value. enter Lighting Delta. for Available Fields.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Level. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 8 In the drawing area. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting CF. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. Average Estimated Illumination. and Required Lighting Level.

■ ■ In the Fields dialog. select Not Between. for Sort by. click Browse. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . under Condition. Select Header. Click Conditional Format. for Custom Colors. and click Browse. Click OK twice. Click OK. select Lighting Delta. press the spacebar. select Level. For Value. Click OK three times. select Average Estimated Illumination. type a hyphen. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. select Required Lighting Level. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.■ For Formula. for Fields. select Red. Click Background Color. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. for Test. Select Blank Line. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Formula. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

First. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. as you place lighting fixtures. 171 . you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create power loads. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create a panel schedule. power circuits.

click Training Files. Under Scheme Definition. Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Color dialog. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.Lighting CF view is open. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. select the color legend. By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . select Orange. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 7 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Project Browser. for Basic Colors. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . You can create additional color schemes. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Lighting Ceiling plan.rvt. click (Open).

Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click the Level 2 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . zoom to space Library 219.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.

however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . the fixtures will move accordingly. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture.5 fc range is satisfied. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.the +/. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.277V. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Apparent Load. scroll to view space space Library 219. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. In the Name dialog. ■ Under Electrical Loads. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.00 VA. enter 162.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. for Name enter and click OK. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Under Electrical. Under Photometrics. for Color Preset. and click OK. and receptacles to your design. Placing Switches. click (Open). for Ballast Loss Factor. Click OK. enter . 9 In space Library 219. select T5 [HO]. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. you add switches. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.ies and click Open. select Xenon and click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter F15. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. In the Select File dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. junction boxes. select Luminous Flux. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.rvt. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Under Photometrics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Lamp. ■ Click OK twice.00 lm. Under Photometrics. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated.85. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.93. click the value for Initial Intensity. select 463T5_S. Placing Switches. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 2 In the drawing area. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select the top center fixture. for Type Mark. In the next exercise. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ Under Photometrics. click the value for Initial Color. specify 15000. ■ Click Apply. Junction Boxes. enter .

6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 7 Click to place the switch. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 12 In the Load Family dialog.rfa and click Open. Select M_Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Placing Switches.NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

21 In the drawing area. Click OK twice. Under Electrical. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 . In the Type Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . Click Edit Type. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Mark.Offset. NOTE When entering values. enter 2750. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. zoom to space Library 219. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Select the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Expand Electrical. NOTE If necessary. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Click OK. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Placing Switches. Space Number. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Junction Boxes. Select Size. Expand General. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Voltage. right-click and click Column Settings. 24 For any column. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. Space Name. Select Load. Distribution System. and Number of Elements. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.

Junction Boxes. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . move the cursor along the wall. 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. Placing Switches. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.

190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle.42 Move the cursor down.

and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.

and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). click (Open). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.Surface: 100A. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . and work toward the higher voltage. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .equipment. 2 In the drawing area.208V MCB . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created.

Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 20. for Max. select 480/277 Wye. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter 20. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. For Panel Name. 15 On the Options Bar.480V MCB . #1 Pole Breakers. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. select 120/208 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter LP-2B.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter PP-2B.Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

and for Category. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . click Check None. 23 In the Filter dialog. which is the logical connection between the elements. Click OK. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. zoom to space Instruction 221.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 38 Press ESC to end the command.

and create permanent wiring. 42 In the Filter dialog. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Click OK. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category.rvt. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. click Check None. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. except without wire.39 Using the same method. select Wires. for Hot Conductors. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Loads. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. enter 2. click Training Files.

5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Voltage. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and then expand circuit 1. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. right-click on the Systems heading. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Distribution System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and verify that Load. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser. Rating. expand Power. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Expand Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. Click Tags. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. under Electrical. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.

Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. enter FR4. click below the first one to place it. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. 47 In the drawing area. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. For Circuit Number. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. select Break. under Identity Data. 40 Click OK twice. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. for Type Mark. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 .33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures.

Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and click Apply. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click (Open). enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 54 Select all of the tags. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter a comma. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. Next you create a switch system. Click OK.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Click OK. for File Name. Click Save. and for Category. click Check None. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 52 In the Save As dialog. 57 In the Filter dialog. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures.rfa. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply.

enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 In the drawing area. for Switch ID. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. under Electrical Lighting. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.

23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. for switch ID. enter b. under Electrical . 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK.

and data systems. and click Element Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. lighting. 4 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. under Electrical . 7 In space Electrical 220. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Click OK. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Circuits are used for power. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select the PP-2B panel. select Electrical Fixtures. Next you create a circuit and size wire. click (Open). The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups).rvt. click Training Files. enter 2.Loads. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and for Category. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.

208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .13 Select the wire again. and click Open. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select Wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 19 Click OK. and in the drawing area. and click to select the circuit. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and in the right pane. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring.rfa. 15 In the Load Family dialog. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. for Ground Wire Tick Mark.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. as shown. 26 Press Delete. in space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 28 In the drawing area.

Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you balance the loads for your design. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 1-#10. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. zoom to space Electrical 220. 1-#10. the distribution is shifted. 1-#12. After re-balancing loads. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 2 In the drawing area. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. for Rating. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. 3 In the Electrical space. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Click OK. 1-#12. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 6 Click OK. select panel LP-2B. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source.rvt. Had there been a greater imbalance. Finally. Under Electrical-Loads. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Scroll down. click Training Files. enter 30A. click Open. click Rebalance Loads.

18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 14 Close the warning dialog.Loads. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 15 Select panel PP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. enter 25A. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical . Next you create a panel schedule. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads. and click OK. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. for Rating. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. select the transformer TP-2B. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. enter 40A. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. and open E601 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click Edit. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. enter 5 mm. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. select Bold and Italic.Panel Schedules. for Appearance. 5 In the Project Browser. select Berlin Sans FB. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Click OK. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Under Header Text. Under Header Text. click (Open). click Training Files. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. expand Sheets (all). 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 4 mm.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 10 Click OK twice. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. under Other. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. The Panel Schedule Report displays.rvt. Select PP-2B. Under Body Text. for Font Size. for Font. 4 Close the report. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.

Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. click Training Files. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. In the System Browser. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C.rvt. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Expand Unassigned. select space Lounge 212. each with a load of 180VA.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1.

Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 16 Close the details dialog. select MDP-1. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Checking Your Design | 215 . for Panel. 20 On the Options Bar. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. under Warnings. In the System Browser. zoom to space Electrical 214. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Duplicate. click Training Files. 4 In the Name dialog.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and click Properties.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . right-click PVC . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary. In this lesson. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. planning is critical to a successful design. Adding a pipe size. type PVC .Vent. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. and click OK. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 219 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Sch 40 . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 15 For System Type. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. for Nominal. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.PVC .006 mm.rfa. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . select Branch. enter 10°. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Tee.Sch 40 .293 mm. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click OK. select Plastic.PVC .5 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . 24 For Inside Diameter. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. click Pipe Settings. select None. 13 In the right panel. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. click Training Files. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. select Tee. 17 In the left pane.PVC . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 27 For the new pipe size. For Offset. enter -1250. 6 Click OK. select M_Tee Sanitary .DWV. under Pipe Types. and open Metric\M_Trap P . for Material. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Modify. 10 On the Selection panel. Tap. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Cross.Vent is listed. 26 Click OK. enter 46. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 18 For System Type.000 mm. 21 In the right pane. select Sanitary. 25 For Outside. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .DWV: Standard. PVC . select Sanitary. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 45. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Main. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 22 Click New Size. enter 54.

221 . and hot and cold water piping. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . select Sanitary 107. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. as shown. select one of the components in the system. and click OK. at the midpoint of the detail lines. for example. a toilet. The base is placed.

19 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.05%. enter -350 mm. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and click Settings. 28 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select 100 mm. for Slope. select Intersections. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 23 For Pipe Type. 24 For Offset. You accept this suggested solution. The default settings are automatically modified. click Solutions. and for Offset. 26 For Pipe Type. 27 For Offset. select PVC . 21 On Options Bar. select Main. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter 1. 29 On the Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 25 In the left pane. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select PVC . 30 Click Modify.Sanitary. and click OK. for Diameter. enter -350 mm.Sanitary. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Solution Type. select Branch. enter -1225.

Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. select the vertical route path segments. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

34 Click Modify. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .33 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.

36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing .Overall. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

41 Close the file with or without saving it. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

5 On the Placement panel.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under M_Lavatory . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. as shown. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel. select 560 mmx560 mm .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Rectangular. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Plumbing Plan . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector.

Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 8 Select the sink.7 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. On the Options Bar. enter 711. and press Enter to create a second sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .2.

12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Add To System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 711. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. and press Enter to create the third sink. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Press Esc. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.2. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

double-click 3D Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee.16 On the Edit System panel. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Select the fitting.Overall. In the System Browser. as shown. click Finish Editing System. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. 19 In the 3D view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

and click Draw Pipe.05%. and click Apply.22 In the plan view. 24 On the Options Bar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. enter 1. with the tee fitting selected. for Slope. for Offset. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). enter 760 mm. 27 Click Modify. When you press the Spacebar. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 26 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe.

select Standard.PVC . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view.DWV. and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe. click to place the fitting.Sch 40 . 29 In the Type Selector.

right-click the right connector. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. double-click the section head to open the section view. for Offset. 34 Press Esc. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 305 mm. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 36 In the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. enter 150 mm. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. on the Options Bar.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.

48 Click Modify. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. press Spacebar. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 46 In the section view. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 49 Using the same method.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks.

rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.PVC . 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view.Sch 40 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. 56 Using the same method. under M_Trap P .DWV. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

Select the double wye pipe on the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click Modify. 58 Using the same method. enter 150 mm. select the left P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click in the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. In the plan view.

select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution.

63 On the Slope Editor panel. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack.05% is selected. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. verify that 1. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Finish. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

5 Select the tee. click Modify.Plumbing Plan .Overall. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click to draw the pipe.Sch 40 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. select the vertical stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select the elbow fitting on the right. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the intersection to place the fitting.DWV. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 7 On the Selection panel. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.PVC . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. right-click the top connector.Design. 3 In the Section view. 9 In the Type Selector.Design. select Standard. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. and click Draw Pipe.Floor level line.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. click Training Files. 2 Right-click Standard. After finishing each exercise. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt.autodesk. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. go to http://www. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this lesson. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. and click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. 267 . If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. In this tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You create a new pipe type. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.

You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. and click Properties. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 2800 is specified. you create project parameters and work with schedules. and then click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . you modify the type properties of the pipe. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. for Material. verify that 2800 is selected. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. structural beams. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type. and enter Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. select Main. For System Type. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Pipe Type. For Pipe Type. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Carbon Steel. or architectural components. For Offset. duct.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). 6 In the Project Browser. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. under Mechanical. 9 Click OK. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. For Offset. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. In this exercise. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. However. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. Next.

the space crossing lines display. For Group parameter under. enter Sprinkler Zone.rvt. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design is highlighted. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. Under Categories. and then click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Name. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Piping Plan . select Spaces. select Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. enter Zone 1.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . right-click. and click Element Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select the upper half of the building. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. 8 Using a crossing window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK twice. under Fire Protection.

and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool.rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Using the same method. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. select Zone 1. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. under Fire Protection. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. and then access instance properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. to which you add various parameters. enter Zone 2.

Obstructed-Combustible. For Units. enter Maximum Spacing. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Field Format. For Name. For Group parameter under. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select Spaces. and on the ribbon. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. for Name. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. 10 In the Format dialog. click the Formatting tab. For Key name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. click Add Parameter. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Fire Protection. Click OK. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Millimeters. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. 7 Click OK. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Maximum Spacing.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. The schedule displays. 11 Click OK twice. enter Light. double-click on each column separator.Design is highlighted. select Length. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select mm. select 0 decimal places. 6 Using the same method. 14 Select the new header. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Unit symbol. For Rounding. For Type of Parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule keys.

Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. For Name. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Extra.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. and press Enter. Click OK. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 16 Using the same method. enter 4575. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter 40.

click . In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. under Available fields. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Rounding. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select Fixed. For Units. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. In the Fields dialog. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Common. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. select Number. Click OK. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. and click Field Format. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select 0 decimal place. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Discipline. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Formula.

Under Field formatting. select Level. 26 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. For Fields. click Edit. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Sort by. ■ In the Format dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then click Field Format. under Other. select Level. At the bottom of the dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then select Hidden field. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. For Then by (second instance). select Number. and select Totals only. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Fields.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . right-click the schedule. select Count. and click View Properties. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. 30 Click OK twice. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. System Name. and select Totals only. select Sprinklers. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. for Fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog.27 In the drawing area. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Calculate totals. for Filter. Under Field formatting. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. delete the word Maximum. select Level equals Level 2. double-click Type. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. and Count. select Grand totals. click Edit. under Other. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Embedded Schedule. for Filter by. for Available fields.

but their values are not determined. select Ordinary. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 46 With the space still selected. 44 In the schedule. select Light. for Protection Area Construction Type. As a result. 52 Click OK. double-click FP . 48 In the floor plan. select space 221 Instruction. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. and access the instance properties. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 41 In the plan view. 43 Click Cancel.Fire Protection Plan Design. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 50 Access the instance properties. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. Unobstructed.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click OK. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. select Ordinary.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you can choose to save your work. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. As you create the system. At the end of this tutorial.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 . and double-click Level 2 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. By following the recommended workflow. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. If the tutorial training files are not present. In the left pane of the Open dialog.autodesk. As you place the sprinklers. go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.rvt. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. After finishing each exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. methodology. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. When this happens. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.

Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. select the sprinklers that you placed. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 206. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. while pressing Ctrl.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and 207. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 11 In the drawing area. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 In space Instruction 202. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Also.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers. 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and 200C). as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . specify a vertical offset. and then press Esc.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 18 Type WT.Design. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.

28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 2900 mm.0. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. for Offset. you adjust the offset. and with piping (physical connection). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. 29 Press Esc. Next. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. under Constraints. In the next exercise. and click Element Properties. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.FP_Ceiling view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. enter 4100. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. For Number. enter 11. This number is determined in the schedule.19 In the floor plan. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. move the cursor to the right. 25 Click OK. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. In this exercise. Notice that the schedule updates. and press Enter.

physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. 1 In the Project Browser. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. However. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. click Training Files. and select Piping. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . as shown. Unlike logical connections (systems).rvt. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 5 Right-click the header.Fire Protection Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View ➤ Systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design is highlighted. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow.

TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and click Select. named Fire Protection Wet. place the cursor over a sprinkler. press Tab. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Next. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and select the system. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. select an initial piping layout. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . Creating a Piping System | 285 . In the System Browser. 11 With the system still selected.

For Pipe Type. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Solutions. 23 For Offset. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and number of elements in the system. verify that 2800. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select 150 mm. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. For Offset. 14 Click Finish Editing System.0 is specified. and a piping layout preview displays. enter -3650. system equipment. The Generate Layout tools are activated. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select Branch. click Settings. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 22 On the Options Bar. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Wet is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. 12 On the Options Bar. providing system editing tools. click Place Base. 15 In the drawing area. enter FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. When the layout is finished. and on the Options Bar. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. for Diameter. 13 In the System Browser. as shown. 19 Click OK. In the left pane.The Edit Piping System panel displays. verify that Main is selected. for System Name.

and green represents branch lines). 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. Creating a Piping System | 287 . On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. In general. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and select solution 4. A (parallel movement control) displays. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. Either relocate the system components. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. 29 Click Finish Layout. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution. or that offset elevations are incorrect. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

33 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. the Connect Into tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design is highlighted. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Next.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Piping Plan . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and then you create piping to physically connect them.

mechanical equipment. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. radiators.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and pipe or duct is created. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. or a system component to display system tools. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 8 In the corridor. air terminals. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 In the drawing area. click Add To System. you can select the pipe or duct. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers.

11 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Solutions is selected. 21 In the Piping Plan. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . verify that Network is selected. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 23 View the result in the 3D view. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and select solution 5. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 14 Close the System Browser. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. 13 Click Finish Layout. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. for Solution Type. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. select 2800. right-click. and click Draw Pipe. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Select the sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. 28 In the drawing area. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and then press Esc.

Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. click Training Files. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Fire Protection Piping Plan .Design is highlighted. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.rvt. Because the whole system highlights. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 31 In the plan view. for Scale. select 1 : 50. indicating that it’s the active view.

and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. 8 Right-click. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

enter 2135. and then right-click the top connector. 10 In the Project Browser. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. Under Identity Data. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for View Name. and then click Modify.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. enter FP Section_Stair. 12 If necessary.Design the active view.Fire Protection Plan . select Design.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 17 Move the cursor up. and click Draw Pipe. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 22 In the drawing area.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select MEP Section. 19 Make Level 2 . drag the top section boundary line up. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. For Default View Template. for Sub-Discipline.Design. 15 Press Spacebar. right-click Design ➤ FP . 14 Select the tee fitting. and press Enter. and click Apply Default View Template.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. select FP . Click OK. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. For View Classification. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet.Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 26 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the cabinet. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). and then click Modify.23 In the section view. for Diameter. verify that Automatically Connect is active. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. select . 25 Verify that Fire Protection .

as shown. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.rfa. 33 In the Type Selector. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. 31 In the alert dialog. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that M_Gate Valve .29 Close the section view. click Yes to load a family.50 mm is selected. and click Open. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. 32 In the Open dialog. and then click Modify.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.Design ➤ 3D Views. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. click Training Files.rvt. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.

height. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. Changing the diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. click Check None. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. width. for Diameter. 4 In the floor plan view. or height. and click OK. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. 6 In the Filter dialog. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. width. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify. select 25mm. or width. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs.

13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. select the linked architectural file. and click Open. 17 On the View Control Bar. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click to place the tag. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. Clear Leader. and after each segment highlights. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. By hiding the linked file. 18 In the 3D view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 12 If necessary. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. Press Esc. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. . zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs).rfa. NOTE Tags are view specific. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view.

and when the section highlights. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. for Diameter. select 100mm. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red. 21 On the Options Bar. press Tab.

as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. 23 Close the 3D view. 24 In the drawing area. The pipe diameter is modified. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 25 On the Options Bar. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. for Diameter. and maximize the floor plan. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 40mm.

In this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. In this tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. You added tags to pipes. For additional practice.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

3 In the Rename View dialog. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan.rvt. under Floor Plans. and view references. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 307 . If the view included detail graphics. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. dependent views. and click OK. matchlines. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Properties. and apply a view template.

Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. and then press Esc. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. more focused. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Using the same method. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 10 In the drawing area. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and click Rename. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 9 Click OK. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. create dependent views for areas B and C.rvt. views and put them on the sheet. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 7 Close the file without saving. as shown.

select Double Dash . 19 In the drawing area. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. select 11. 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value. In the Color dialog. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. select black. For Line Pattern. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Weight. and then press Esc. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H.

20 Select the upper view reference and. 25 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 21 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. on the Options Bar. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. and zoom to each of the view references. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. for View Name.rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and select the section box. right-click 3D Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. For Default View Template. and click Properties. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 4 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing Isometric. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Domestic Water. enter Plumbing Isometric . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 27 Using the same method.

for View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. For Sub-Discipline.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and click to select it. Click OK. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 10 Right-click. select Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display.Domestic Water. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. select Documentation. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. and then click OK. select 3. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Click Apply. select Dash.

13 Using the same method. and click to select it. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. 15 Right-click. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . as shown). and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

For Slope. select 1. and in the Type Selector. verify that Common is selected. and in the view properties. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. specify Plumbing . On the View Control Bar. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing.Sanitary Waste. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial. click on the Format value. and for Default View Template. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 19 Using methods learned previously. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Isometric.16 Press Esc.

as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and click to place the spot slope annotation. for Rounding. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .rvt. click Training Files. 26 Press Esc twice. 22 Click OK twice. 27 Close the file with or without saving it.■ In the Format dialog. select To the nearest 10. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. When the view is associated with a sheet. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.

and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. select 1 : 50. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. for Scale. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). Creating Callout Views | 317 . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click OK.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. under Sheets (all). and select the viewport. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. drag it to the sheet. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

enter WSHP PART PLAN. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . right-click the callout view. For Title on Sheet. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

and click OK. under Names. right-click the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 26 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Apply View Template.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 25 In the Project Browser. enter Typical WSHP Detail. Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename.

322 .

linetypes.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 323 . duct tags. as shown.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. symbols. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. work with model-based components. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and annotation to create a legend. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Creating Annotations In this exercise. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. click Training Files.

8 With the text still selected. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 9 Press Esc twice. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

Creating Annotations | 325 . 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. 16 In the drawing area. as shown. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. and a segment of rectangular duct.

as shown. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. clear Leader. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK. and click Open. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. If necessary. under Category. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 25 In the drawing area.rfa. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. for Ducts. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.17 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.26 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the drawing area. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Creating Annotations | 327 . 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Leader. select Horizontal. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc.

34 In the drawing area. for Leader. as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. 36 Press Esc twice.

and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select the last tag placed. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Creating Dimensions | 329 . indicating that it’s the active view. 40 Using the method learned previously. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. lay out. for Leader Arrowhead.rvt. and lock lighting fixtures. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 37 In the drawing area. and all elements of that type are affected.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. not simply an instance property. and click OK. That’s because you changed a type property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Press Esc. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. and then select the interior face of the wall. On the Options Bar.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 14 Using the same method. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. select the dimension line. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 12 Click EQ. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.

Because the dimensions are locked. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Creating a Legend | 331 . and press Enter. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notes. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. linework. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. annotation symbols. 19 Select the dimension value (3376.9). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 17 Press Esc. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and offset them from the wall. click Training Files. 20 Using the same methods. click the 3 interior locks on the line. enter 2430. Creating a Legend In this exercise.rvt.

select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.200 Neck. Click OK. select 1 : 50. select Floor Plan.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For View. click below the title to place the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 .Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 1. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 10 Using the same method. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 5 Click in the drawing area. enter Diffuser Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

Creating a Legend | 333 . 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1.11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.DROP and its text note. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 21 Press Esc.

Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.30 Select Spot Elevation . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. enter E. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 335 .

336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. and select Title w Line . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.113 East elevation view. 337 . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.Detailing 15 In this lesson. and text. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . detail groups. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.rvt. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A drafting view using detail components.

4 On the Options Bar. Next.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 East on the sheet. place Power Riser . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and click to place it. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Using the same method. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. and then modify and align the views.

9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Identity Data. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. for Title on Sheet. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . right-click. and click Activate View. 13 Right-click. select the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Deactivate View. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. 12 Select the Level 1 line.

select the 113 East elevation view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select Title w Line . 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and click Activate View. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. In the next exercise. 22 Press Esc. you add wiring to the diagram. 21 Using the drag control. right-click. right-click. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. Under Modify Subcategories. select 6. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. for Name. notice that there are no snaps active. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Chain is selected. 2 Close the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. enter Electrical Power. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and then click OK. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. as shown.rvt. click New. As you draw. for Line Weight. In the Line Styles dialog. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the New Subcategory dialog. expand Lines. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. click Training Files. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 North view.

10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 3mm. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. as shown. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

31 While pressing Ctrl. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 33 On the Options Bar. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. and select 1. 29 Click Modify. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 28 Click above the cap. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

40 Press Esc. and press Enter. Press Esc. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Offset. enter 3. change the length of the bottom line to 3. enter 7.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click on the length dimension value. and then press Esc. Using the same method. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and press Enter. you can ensure that they stay together. You enter exact values for each line length. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 42 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.0. enter 12.

drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. select all 3 lines. enter Ground. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 47 In the drawing area. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 46 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 50 With the group selected. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. while pressing Ctrl. 54 Select the group. and then press Esc. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. 52 Select the detail group. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. for Name. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

and will place it on sheet E01. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 59 Close the file with or without saving it. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. In later exercises.

Walkthroughs. and Left sides converge. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.rvt. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 3 Select the section box. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply View Template. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Rename. 8 On the ViewCube. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC .Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. click Home. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then press Esc. Back. for Name. and double click Typical Make Up Air.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Right-click the copy. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. select 3D Views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and then click the corner where the Top. click Training Files. and click OK.

and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .■ ■ Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 15 Using the same method. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Move the cursor down and to the left. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point.

as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and under Extents.18 Press Esc. under Extents. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 19 Complete the text labels. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. To rotate and reposition a text label. and then click OK. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. as shown.

Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Deactivate View. Place a detail component. and click View Properties. 33 Right-click the view.25 Click OK. and click OK. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.rvt. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. 29 Right click the view. clear Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Activate View. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. scroll down. select Crop View and Section Box. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 32 In the Instance Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. 30 On the View Control Bar. and under Extents. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Sub-Discipline. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 12 On the Element panel. select Plumbing. For Scale. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. as the rectangle start point. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select 1 : 5. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. right-click the view name. Click OK. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click the point at the top of the drain. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 9 Zoom in to the component. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser.

click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.I. select C. 20 Select 1.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. and click OK.P.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 18 With the filled region still selected. for Type.

(Line). 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 34 Press Esc. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 28 Click Modify. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 23 In the drawing area. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. and then click to select them. select Multiple. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. select the filled region.

37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

as shown. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and click OK. and then click to select them. (Rectangle).D. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. select the Flashing Membrane group. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. for Name.. 45 Using the method learned previously. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. draw wide detail lines as shown.

58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . as shown. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 55 Press Esc. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. press Spacebar twice. 61 Using the same method.

as shown. 67 On the Options Bar. 64 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down.62 Press Esc twice.

and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.70 In the Keynotes dialog.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and click to specify the second leader point. 72 If necessary. 71 Click Modify. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. select 15000 (Division 15 . 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide.

Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc twice. and click to place it. 88 In the drawing area.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful